JP2015070984A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce a control burden by simplifying processing.SOLUTION: Game control means (a game control device 100) includes: interval instruction means for generating interval information (interval command) instructing end of a round game; ending instruction means for generating ending information (ending command) instructing end of a special game state; and residual ball processing period setting means for setting a residual ball processing period (big winning hole residual ball processing time) to confirm that game balls being residual within variation winning devices (special variation winning devices 38 and 39) are to be discharged from the variation winning devices when ending the round game. The interval instruction means generates the interval information when ending the round game regardless of which round game is ended among a predetermined number of times of round games. When all the predetermined number of times of round games are ended, the ending instruction means generates the ending information when ending the residual ball processing period.

Description

  The present invention includes a variable winning device that can be converted between a closed state and an open state, game control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling an effect related to a game based on information from the game control means, And a game machine that generates a special game state in which a round game in which the variable prize apparatus is converted to an open state corresponding to the result of the game is executed a predetermined number of times.

A round game in which a variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state and an open state is provided, and the variable winning device is converted to an open state when a predetermined special result mode is derived as a stop result mode of the variable display game. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is executed a predetermined number of times is known.
In such a gaming machine, the game control device transmits an interval command to the effect control device when the number of opening of the variable winning device is not a predetermined value (round upper limit value), and the number of opening of the variable winning device. Is set to a predetermined value (round upper limit value), an ending command is transmitted to the effect control device (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-319286 A

  Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, every time the variable prize apparatus is closed, a process for determining whether or not the number of times the variable prize apparatus is released reaches a predetermined value, that is, a process for determining whether or not the current round is the final round. Was necessary.

  An object of the present invention is to simplify processing and reduce a control burden in a gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state and an open state, a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit that controls an effect related to the game based on information from the game control unit,
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a round game in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state corresponding to the result of the game is executed a predetermined number of times,
The game control means includes
Interval instruction means for generating interval information for instructing the effect control means to end the round game;
Ending instruction means for generating ending information for instructing the effect control means to end the special gaming state;
A remaining ball processing period setting means for setting a remaining ball processing period for confirming that a game ball remaining in the variable winning device at the end of the round game is discharged from the variable winning device;
With
The interval instruction means generates interval information at the end of the round game, regardless of how many round games of the predetermined number of round games have ended,
The ending instruction means generates the ending information at the end of the remaining ball processing period when all of the predetermined number of round games have ended.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the interval information is generated every time the round game is completed, and the ending information can be generated when the predetermined number of round games are completed. The interval information can be generated without performing the process of determining whether or not it is a round. Therefore, the processing is simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The production control means includes
An effect of notifying the end of the special gaming state is executed based on the ending information instructed by the game control means.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, the ending information is not generated immediately after the end of the predetermined number of round games but is generated at the end of the remaining ball processing period. However, the effect of notifying the end of the special gaming state is not immediately executed. Therefore, after the predetermined number of round games are completed, until the remaining ball processing period ends, it is difficult for the player to understand the type of the special game state, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
In the special game state,
A first special game state for converting the variable prize apparatus into an open state and a closed state in a first opening / closing pattern;
A second special game state in which the variable prize apparatus is converted into an open state and a closed state by a second open / close pattern including the first open / close pattern;
There is
In the second opening / closing pattern, the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state at first by the first opening / closing pattern and thereafter by a predetermined opening / closing pattern.
According to the third aspect of the present invention, in the first special gaming state, the ending information is generated after the first opening / closing pattern is completed, and in the second special gaming state, the predetermined opening / closing pattern following the first opening / closing pattern is generated. Ending information is generated after completion. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know whether the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state until the ending information is generated after the first opening / closing pattern ends or until the predetermined opening / closing pattern starts. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The invention according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the special game state,
A third special gaming state for converting the variable prize apparatus into an open state and a closed state in a third opening / closing pattern;
A fourth special game state in which the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state by a fourth open / close pattern including a common open / close pattern common to the third open / close pattern;
There is
In the third opening / closing pattern, the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state at first by the common opening / closing pattern and then by a specific opening / closing pattern,
In the fourth opening / closing pattern, the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state at first by the common opening / closing pattern and thereafter by an opening / closing pattern more advantageous to the player than the specific opening / closing pattern. Features.
According to the invention described in claim 4, it is difficult for the player to know whether the third special game state or the fourth special game state until the opening / closing pattern after the end of the common opening / closing pattern is started. Can enhance the interest of

  According to the present invention, the processing is simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in a game control apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2 (at the time end of time reduction). It is a figure explaining an upper university winning opening opening / closing pattern. It is a figure explaining a lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 3 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the difference between the big prize opening and closing patterns 3 and 4. It is a figure explaining the difference of the lower large prize opening opening / closing patterns 1-3. It is a figure explaining an interval period. It is a figure explaining an ending period. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the advance notice setting process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch type | system | group command processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a start memory display and a display without a start memory. It is a figure which shows an example of a prefetch low probability zone and a prefetch high probability zone. It is a figure which shows an example of a prefetch effect distribution table. It is a figure explaining an example of a prefetch effect and a advance notice effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a prefetch effect and a advance notice effect. 10 is a flowchart for explaining prefetch command processing according to Modification 1; It is a figure explaining an example of the advance notice effect in the modification 1. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining prefetch command processing according to Modification 2; It is a figure explaining an example of the advance notice effect in the modification 2. 10 is a flowchart for explaining prefetch command processing according to Modification 3; 10 is a flowchart for explaining advance notice setting processing according to Modification 3; It is a figure explaining an example of special mode production in modification 3. 10 is a flowchart for explaining prefetch command processing according to Modification 4; It is a flowchart explaining a special display mode setting process. It is a figure explaining an example of the special display effect in the modification 4. It is a figure explaining an example of the special display effect in the modification 4. It is a figure explaining an example of the special display in the modification 4. It is a figure explaining an example of the special display effect in the modification 4.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that has a lamp or the like built therein and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. The effect button 25 forms an operation means with a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). it can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating is provided at an upper part and a right part of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). The start winning opening 36 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be converted to a state in which a game ball can easily flow into the upper portion by opening it in the shape of a reverse “C” at the top, and a second start winning opening ( An ordinary variable winning device (Fuden) 37 having a starting winning area is provided.

  The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is awarded. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that a game ball can be won even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the game ball may be harder to win than the open state.

  Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device (first big prize opening, lower large size) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. (Winning opening) 38 is arranged.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In addition, a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the inside of the big winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by one of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  Also, in the upper left part of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device (second big prize opening, upper big prize winning) that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39) is provided. The second special variation prize winning device 39 includes a pair of movable members 39c, 39c, and the pair of movable members 39c, 39c is normally closed with a gap of about the diameter of the game ball (disadvantageous for the player). Hold). However, an armor portion 40a that restricts the inflow of the game ball to the inside of the center case 40 extends above the second special variable prize-winning device 39 so that the game ball cannot win in the closed state. Yes. When the result of the special figure change display game is a predetermined stop display mode and a special game state is entered, a reverse “C” character is formed by the special prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. The game ball is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) where the game ball can easily flow into the game ball, allowing the game ball to flow in, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Yes. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area). In the special game state, one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is released, and which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. Is done.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. Further, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holdings is “3”, only the lamp 3 is turned on. When the number of hold is “4”, all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

  The special figure 1 holding display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. Here, the number of starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 in the same lighting manner as the ordinary figure hold indicator 56.

  For example, the first gaming state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state display unit 58 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the short time state occurs.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example. If the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 3), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the normal figure change display game is the normal figure specifying result, the normal figure is hit and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the starting memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in the special game state or in the special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half variation pattern as a pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a fraud signal fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy. A signal is also input. The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. Signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 Is input and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 to transmit data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates the moving light 16) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, an effect agent switch 47 (effect) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 by detecting the on / off state of the motor switch) and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal start gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b or the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize opening solenoid 39b. The members 39c and 39c are opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) is first performed to set a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. In step S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) is performed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Next, a firing prohibition signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S4). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S5), an interrupt mode setting process (step S6) for setting the interrupt processing mode is performed, and a process for setting the power supply delay timer is performed (step S6). S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and a command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc., by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S17). S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether the checksums coincide with each other (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Thereafter, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S22). If the probability is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the probability is high (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on, for example. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to an effect control board (step S25), and it progresses to step S31.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to zero. (Step S27), the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (Step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (step S30), and it progresses to step S31.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S25 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in step S30 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a decoration indicating the number of suspensions in FIGS. A special figure 1 hold number command, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the bit transposition pattern is a bit arrangement different from the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). ) Is a pattern that defines how to replace the data when stored as. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the hit of the usual figure in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times of checking and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not ended (step S57: N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57: Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step S61). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a symbol that determines the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing (step S102) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to capture signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in step S4 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 A magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) is performed in which a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality or a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality. Then, external information editing processing (step S112) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, after performing the process of restoring the saved register data in step S101 (step S113), the process for permitting the interrupt (step S114) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S102) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. . Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. The input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (step S150), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152), and the logic between the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the time of the previous interrupt The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken, and saved as a rising edge (step S155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). In step S164, the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step S167).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded and combined and output to the external information output port 137 (step S168). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S169). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S170).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S171). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S172). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S173) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is classified by the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the number of counts in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, but the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers in all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S190. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of prize balls corresponding to the area is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of winning balls and the acquired number of winning balls are added and saved as a new remaining number of winning balls in the remaining winning ball area (step S186). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the remaining prize ball number area is 10 or more, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step S187). If not 10 or more (step S187; N), the process proceeds to step S190. Transition. If it is 10 or more (step S187; Y), a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S188), and the main prize ball signal is obtained. The value of the output count area is updated by +1 (step S189), and the process returns to step S187. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step S190, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S190), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step S191). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step S191; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step S191; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status is in an idle state (step S192).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status is information in which whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal is set in an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, payout Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  If the payout busy signal status is not in the idle state (step S192; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When not in an idle state, a busy state and an indefinite state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal status is in the idle state (step S192; Y), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S193: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S194), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting number of all the winning number counter areas has been completed. (Step S195). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S195; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S195; N), the process returns to step S193 and the above processing is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S193 that there is a count number (step S193; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S196), and the target winning number counter is counted. A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (step S197). Then, the payout command is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S198), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (step S199), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general winning prize port 35, first special variable winning prize device 38, second prize provided in the gaming area 32 is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Have However, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award corresponding to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And It is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted by updating at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined prize area and by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 15 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). In addition, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Y), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal number is next time. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S226). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

  When the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 16 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S236). S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to one lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S301), and a large winning is achieved. In spite of the fact that the mouth is not open, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning mouth and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  In the fraud monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the number of illegal winnings Information of an upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), a winning mouth monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening monitoring table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower grand prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is achieved. An illegal & winning prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed. Then, a fraud monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

  Next, a fraud monitoring table is prepared for a winning switch (a start port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric train (step S307), monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning ( Step S308) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S309), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S310) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S314). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S315) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step S316). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step S317; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step S317; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S317), and a gaming machine state check is performed to determine whether an error has occurred. Processing (step S318) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S319) for setting a busy signal status based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step S317 to S319 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step S317 to S319 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to cheat by opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the lower count switch 38a. In the case of the upper count switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step S325).

  The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  If the determined number has not been exceeded (step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 326) S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 19 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S361). If there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S354). Step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and it is determined whether all switches have been monitored (step S361). . If an overflow has occurred (step S359; Y), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S361).

  If all the switches have not been monitored (step S361; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S361; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 20 shows the command setting process (step S342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

  If a command is being transmitted (step S363; Y), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; N), the transmission circuit is initialized because the circuit may be abnormal (step S364), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer ( After step S365), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

  Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Y), the command setting process is terminated. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; N), the circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 21 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S319) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S371). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S371; Y), a busy state flag is set as the determination status (step S372), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S371; N), the idle state flag is set as the determination status (step S373), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current signal is different from the previous signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change in on or off (step S375). If not (step S375; N), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1. (Step S378). If they are different (step S375; Y), the current signal state is saved as the previous busy signal data (step S376), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S377), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step S378).

  Next, it is determined whether the time counted by the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) (step S379). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step S379; N), the payout busy signal is determined. End the check process. If the signal confirmation time has been reached (step S379; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept before the confirmation time (step S380), and whether the value of the busy signal status area matches the determination status? Is determined (step S381).

  If it matches the determination status (step S381; Y), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the determination status does not match (step S381; N), the determination status is saved in the busy signal status area (step S382), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 or the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the special figure game process number referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed.

  In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit or a big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” at step A8, a process for setting an interval command, a process for setting a necessary information for performing a winning ball remaining ball process, and the like, a process for opening a big prize opening (step A13) is performed.

  In step A8, when the game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting an ending command, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for performing a process of setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A17) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A19) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not 0 in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A115, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A114).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A114 that there is no fraud in ordinary power transmission (step A114; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A115), The starting port switch common process (step A116) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A114; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the special drawing start port switch common process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step S1). A201). If there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; Y), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Y), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step A204).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal which is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output count is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Y), the process proceeds to step A209.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A209). If the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure hold number to be updated (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated by 1 (step A212), and is monitored. The decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure hold corresponding to the monitoring start switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step A220) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (step A209; N), a special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step A210) and command setting processing (step A211) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 25, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are satisfied (step A231). If not satisfied (step A231; N), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step A231; Y), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.

Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In addition, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, when the open extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation, This is a case where it is not in a state, and a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).
In addition, you may perform the process after step A232, without performing determination (step A231) whether the conditions which may perform a prefetch effect are satisfied. That is, the process of step A231 (the process of determining whether the condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied) may be deleted, and the condition for executing the prefetch effect may not be provided.

  In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step A231; Y), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step A232) is performed to determine whether or not. If the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is set. A pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; N), a stoppage stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (step A237).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and command setting processing is performed (step A239). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A240) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starter switch (step A240). A241), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and command setting processing is performed ( Step A244), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a start memory holding unit that stores a random number value obtained with an upper limit of a predetermined number as a start memory. Further, the game control device 100 pre-determines the execution contents of the variable display game based on the random number value stored as the start-up memory in the start-up memory holding means, and pre-determination result information (a pre-read pattern command, a pre-read fluctuation pattern command, etc.) As a pre-determining means for generating Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, is the big prize opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the second special variable prize winning device 39) open, that is, in the special gaming state? Is determined (step A251). If the big prize opening is not open (step A251; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the big prize opening is open (step A251; Y), 0 is set to the prize counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening that is added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether the first special variation winning device 38 is in a special gaming state (Step A253).

  When the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A253; Y), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (step A254). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A254; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 38a) (step A255).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A257). Then, a command setting process (step A258) is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

  If there is no input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (step A259; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (step A259; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A261). Then, command setting processing (step A262) is performed, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

  On the other hand, when the lower major prize opening is not open (step A253; N), that is, the upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (special game that opens the second special variable prize winning device 39). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; Y), it is determined whether the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A264).

  When it is not in the process of remaining the winning prize remaining ball (step A264; N), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and an upper winning prize count command is prepared (step A266). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264; Y), an upper winning ticket count command is prepared (step A266). Thereafter, command setting processing (step A267) is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of big winning mouth counts (step A269), and the number of big winning mouth counts is the upper limit (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of possible game balls has been exceeded (step A270).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; N), the big winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; Y), the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step A274), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17 and A19) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 27, in the symbol variation control process, first, of the first special diagram and the second special diagram, the special diagram variation control flag relating to the special diagram to be controlled (for example, the first special diagram) is changing. Is checked (step A281).

  If the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step S282). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; N), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A288). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Y), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first and second special figures are saved. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A289). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0 (step A301), it is determined whether it is 0 (step A302).
If it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (step A302; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A303). If not started (step A303; N), the customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A304).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A305), a command setting process (step A306) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A307) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A303 (step A303; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A307) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). The normal process transition setting process 1 ends.

Returning to FIG. 28, if the number of special figure 1 and the number of special figure 2 are not 0 in step A302 (step A302; N), the variable order flag is loaded from the variable order flag saving area (step A308). It is checked whether the loaded change order flag is a flag indicating the start of change in the special figure 1 (first special figure change display game) (step A309), and it is determined whether or not it is a flag indicating the start of change in the special figure 1 (step A309). Step A310).
If it is determined in step A310 that the change order flag is not a flag indicating the start of change in FIG. 1 (step A310; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A311) is performed, and the special figure in FIG. The changing process transition setting process (step A312) is performed, and the special figure routine process is terminated.
If it is determined in step A310 that the fluctuation order flag is a flag indicating the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (step A310; Y), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A313) is performed. The special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A314) is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A313) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 30, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 31 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A342). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A343) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is a big hit (step A344; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is not a big hit (step A344; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while saving the deviation information to the big hit flag 1.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 32 shows the big hit determination process (step A343) in the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability state is present (step A353).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A353; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). If not in the high probability state (step A353; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; N), that is, if the big hit is, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A358), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A367). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A368), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. Save in the information area (step A369). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A361; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A370). A371), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A373), and command setting processing (step A374) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (step A381). If it is not in the special drawing time (step A381; N), the normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step A382). If the special drawing time is short (step A381; Y), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A383).

  Then, the number of special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded (step A384), the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). . Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the production mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). If the production mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394). If the stop symbol pattern is not a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394; N). ) Loads the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepares it (step A397).

  On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Y), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A394; Y), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step A392. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step A396), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A397).

  When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step A400). Then, a sorting process (step A401) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A403), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A406). ). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 36 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step A398) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code with no sorting (step A412; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A417) and end the 2-byte sorting process. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; N), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A413).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A413 from the random value loaded in Step A397 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A414). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A415; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process proceeds to step A413 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step A413, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random value as the new random value in step A415, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A415 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A415 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 37 shows the distribution process (steps A401 and A407) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step A421). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step A422; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A427), and the sorting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A423).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A423 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in step A400 or A406, a new random value is calculated ( In step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A425; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process proceeds to step A423, and the subsequent steps Process.

  That is, in step A423, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A425. Further, a new random value is calculated (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A427), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A435).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A436), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A438), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A439), and command setting processing is performed (step A440). . Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step A443), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (Step A444).

  Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). When the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step A446; Y), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Y), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. In (Step A448; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (Step A449).

  If the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; N), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). A command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). If the special figure high probability is present (step A449; Y), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S451). A452), a command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the change start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A446; N), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; N), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; N) ends the change start information setting process. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A311) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 39, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processing (step A464, see FIG. 34) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step A465). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see step A466, see FIG. 35) for setting a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (See step A467, FIG. 38), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 40 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 31 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A471). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A472). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A473, see FIG. 32) is performed for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is a big hit (step A474; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is not a big hit (step A474; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 33 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A487). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Furthermore, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A488), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A489). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A481; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region (step A490). A491), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A493), and command setting processing (step A494) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A496). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 42 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A314) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 28). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 43 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A312) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 28). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the special figure changing process, it is first determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). If there is no stop extension information (step A601; N), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606). To complete the special figure display process.

  If there is stop extension information (step A601; Y), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). If it is the stop extension information 1 (step A603; Y), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step S604) A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not stop extension information 1 (step A603; N), that is, when it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605), The special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A606) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613, A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output is determined in the external information terminal A control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the count signal control timer area (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A621), and the RWM big hit flag 2 is loaded. A process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623). If it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623; Y), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A628), and the second special A test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A623; N) as a result of the check, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (Step A625). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A626). If it is determined that the big hit flag is a big hit (step A626; Y), the big hit (first figure big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A test signal related to the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A633), and a command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and a command setting process ( Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638). )I do.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A640). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening opening information (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is cleared (step A641), and the special winning opening is opened. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the information (step A642).

  Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A644). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later. Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A626; N) in step A626 in FIG. Time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A647) for managing the number of game executions is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A648, see FIG. 29) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A651) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). . Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), and the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A656). Save the low probability of ordinary figure & no ordinary power support flag in the flag area (step A657).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A659), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A662). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A671; N), the effect remaining rotational speed, which is the number of times that the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A673). When the remaining effect rotation speed becomes 0 (step A673; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step A675).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S676). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), command setting processing (step A681) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step A673; N), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether there is any (step A682). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Y), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), command setting processing (step A684) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (step A647) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the time shortening variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is being reached (step A691). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A691; Y), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A691; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is short (time short state) (step A692).

  If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A692; N), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step A692; Y), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time shortening variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time shortening variation number is not 0 (step A694; N), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated. If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A694; Y), that is, if the time-short state ends in this special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step A695), Command setting processing (step A696) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
FIG. 50 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step A697) in the above-described time-reduced variation frequency update process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction), first, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

  Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A704). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A706). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

  Here, the kind of special result and the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening (special variable winning device) in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation are 2, 11, 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. This is a special result that is considered to be a short time. In addition, 11R normally has 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). It is a special result that is in a short time until execution.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a lower major prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) and an upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), and a plurality of opening / closing patterns are prepared for each. ing. One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening and closing patterns, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 51 shows an open / close pattern of the upper university winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). The top prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 51 (a) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short time state. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval time of 1448 ms is interposed. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

  The top prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 51 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the time is short when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing manner as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, but the ending time is 1400 ms. The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 51 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the round in which the opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with the interval time of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state is ended.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 51 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and it is difficult to recognize which opening / closing pattern the player has as the same effect on the display device 41 or the like. Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 during the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 51 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  FIG. 52 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower grand prize opening (the first special variable winning device 38). The lower grand prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52A is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal. In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, and then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 3 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 2 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 at an interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the open / close pattern is 1 to 3 (step A752).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; Y), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set. Value)) (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; N), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and command setting processing is performed. (Step A754) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755). If it is the first round (step A755; Y), the big prize opening information is the lower special prize opening (first special prize) It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 38) is an open / close pattern (step A756). If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A756; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set (step A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

  When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG. Further, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; N), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step A761), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; N), it is determined whether the started round is 2-11 rounds (step A762), and the started rounds are 2-11. If it is round (step A762; Y), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A763). Then, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the lower winning opening / closing pattern are set (step A763; N). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step S763). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the special prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A766; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper prize opening / closing pattern are set (step S766). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper big opening / closing pattern (step A766; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the lower big opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

  If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round and after of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step A769) and the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  54, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer area (step A770), and the end value (E) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer upper limit area. Save (Step A771). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773).

  When the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773; Y), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. Further, when the special prize opening information is not the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern (Step A773; N), the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (Step A775), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. One of the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 is set by the above processing.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 55 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, output data is acquired, saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), opening / closing time value is acquired and special figure game process timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting process is terminated. To do. With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 56 shows the transition process 1 (step A774) during the big prize opening opening process in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information of the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step A794). . Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (step A795), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 57 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A775). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 801), and the processing number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A802). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the top prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and information in the big winning count area storing the number of winning prizes in the big winning prize is cleared (step A804). . Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth distinguishing flag area (step A805), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A811). Step A812).

  When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; N), solenoid information setting processing (step A817, see FIG. 55) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed 3 (step A818), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended. As shown in FIG. 60, in the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A841), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step A842), and finish the process transition setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening.

  Returning to FIG. 58, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; Y), the big winning opening release information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (upper winning opening opening pattern 1). -3) is determined (step A813). When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; Y), the big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A816) is performed, and the process for opening the big prize opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and no interval command or ending command is transmitted.

In addition, when the big winning opening information is not the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step A813; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared regardless of whether or not the current round is the final round. (Step A814), a command setting process (Step A815) is performed, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (Step A816) is performed, and the large winning opening open process is terminated.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as interval instruction means for generating interval information (interval command) for instructing the effect control means (effect control device 300) to end the round game.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 59 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A818) in the above large winning opening releasing process. In this special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, off data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 38b or 39b is used as the large winning port solenoid. The data is saved in the output data area (step A834), and the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.
That is, the game control device 100 confirms that the game balls remaining in the variable winning devices (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are discharged from the variable winning device at the end of the round game. Remaining sphere processing period setting means for setting a remaining sphere processing period to be confirmed (large winning opening remaining sphere processing time) is provided.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A851; N), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special prize opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step A852). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated. The interval time is set to a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A851; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A854), Command setting processing (step A855) is performed, and a game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A856). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A857), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A858) is performed, so that the winning prize remaining ball The process ends.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as an ending instruction means for generating ending information (ending command) for instructing the effect control means (the effect control device 300) to end the special game state.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22400 ms, including 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period. Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 1400 ms in combination with 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 62 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A861), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A861). A862).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is opened. A signal relating to the end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A856) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening completion of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is ended. Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A875), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step A880). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step A881), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the jackpot ending process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the current special gaming state is a high probability after the special gaming state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

  If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and a command setting process (step A905) is performed.

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A907). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A908), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).

  Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and command setting processing (step A912) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 65 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A923), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 66 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A903) in the big hit end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

  That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is a short time number. Is saved (step A947). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A948), and a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A949). The normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).

  If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether or not the time reduction state is in progress, A general map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map process is performed. In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure. If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B16) ) To complete the usual game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than the upper limit (step B102).

  When the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved maps is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved maps is calculated. (Step B104). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. It is determined whether there is any (step B121). Then, when it is normal (step B121; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Y). If it is determined, the count of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 9) (step B124), and it is determined that the count has reached the upper limit (step B124; Y). Then, the pointer (the value at which the hit ends) is loaded from the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal hit (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step B126), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the map is not being hit (step B121; N), if it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; N), or step B124. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B124; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure usual process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of usual figure holds is 0 (step B131), and when the number of usual figure holds is 0 (step B131; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. In addition, when the usual figure hold number is not 0 (step B131; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM common figure random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step B132), and the usual figure change display game is executed. It is determined whether the probability of the hit result is a normal high probability that is higher than usual, that is, whether the time is short (step B133).

  When it is not the time of the normal high probability (step B133; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of the normal low probability (step B134). If the value of the winning random number does not match the low probability determination value (step B134; N), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step B135). B136), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Y), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step B149).

  In step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Y), the high probability lower limit determination in which the value of the hit random number is a lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the time of the normal probability. If the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; N), a plurality of consecutive determinations to be used when the hit random number value is normally high probability It is determined whether the value is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value (step B138).

  If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step B138; N), that is, if it is a win, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol is hit by the normal stop symbol A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value at Step B137 (Step B137; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value at Step B138 (Step B138; Y ), That is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the usual figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per ordinary figure (holding number 1) Is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

  After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress (during the short-time state) (step B148). If the power transmission support is not in progress (step B148; N), the fluctuation time when there is no power transmission support (for example, 10 seconds) ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B148; Y), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B150). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B151) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition process 1]
FIG. 72 shows the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the normal figure normal process described above. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B161). B162). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 73 shows the process shift setting process (step B151) during the normal map change in the normal map normal process described above. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B171). Step B172). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and a changing flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B175), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (step B10) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the process of changing the normal map, a process transition setting process (step B180) during the normal map display is performed. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the normal map display process transition setting process, first, a process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B181). Is saved in the usual game process number area (step B182). After that, a general map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) that is a display time of the result of the general map change display game on the general map display is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is set as the general game display process. Save in the timer area (step B184). Further, a signal related to the end of the normal change is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and a stop flag indicating that the normal change display game is stopped is saved in the normal change control flag area ( In step B186), the normal diagram display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the process for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal process is loaded (step B201), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B202), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step B203).

  When the hit flag is not hit information (step B203; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal / normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Y), it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (during the time saving state) (step B204).

  If the normal power support is not in progress (step B204; N), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B205). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved. Save in the upper limit area of control pointer per figure (step B207). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B204; Y), the power transmission release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of power transmission support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 76 shows a process for setting a transition to a normal map during the normal map display process described above (step B211). In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B221), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B222). After that, a signal related to the hitting of the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the general electric signal is output to drive (turn on) the general electric solenoid. On data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

  Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period. The information on the winning number area is cleared (step B226). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during normal map is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map is controlled during the normal map control. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value area (the value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B302; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B303), A general electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B302; Y), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B303. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal hit process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 78 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-described normal process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after closing (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B312), and the off data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B313), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1, 4, 6, or 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is used to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. On data is set in the data area (step B315), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9, the process goes to step B316 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13). Then, “4” is set as the process number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B317), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B318). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B319), and the general electric operation transition setting process is ended.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, a universal figure end process shift setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the normal figure end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the general figure end process is set (step B401), and the process number is set as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B402).

  Thereafter, the ordinary ending time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B403), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data region (step B404). The normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to 37 is cleared (step B405). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the normal control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the normal figure end process transition setting process ends.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B502).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and a flag for specifying the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is monitored. Save in the period flag area (step B504), and the usual process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 81, in the segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which the display mode on the general map hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the general map hold number is displayed. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the usual figure hold display (step S502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step S503), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. The data is saved in the segment area of the container (step S504).

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step S505), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 hold indicator. Are saved in the segment area (step S506). Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), and display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit ( Step S508).

  Next, a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined is set (step S509), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. Are saved in the segment area of each game state display section (step S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (step S511). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step S511; Y), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; N), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. To do.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step S603).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is set. Save in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. Is updated by -1 if the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the values do not match (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), command setting processing is performed (step S615), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the radio wave is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 (step S701). S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706).

  When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step S707), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S708), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709).

  If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step S709; N), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S104), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107), and the magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111), the information collection terminal and game Creates information to be output to an external device such as a field internal management device or a test firing test device and sets it in an output buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the external information editing process, first, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal for editing a winning opening winning signal. Edit processing (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (step S803). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (step S804).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (step S804; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S805). On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (step S804; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). Thereafter, processing for setting information according to the error state and the security state is performed.

  In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, first, a security signal for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error status signal Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, a glass frame open error is occurring (step S809; Y), and the front frame An open error is occurring (step S810; Y), a lower prize winning fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), an upper winning prize fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), and an ordinary electric power fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Y) or radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error state The signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; N), the off-data of the security signal is used as external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the main prize ball signal editing process, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step S823; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The control timer initial value is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S823). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; N), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S826; Y), the process proceeds to step S827. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S826; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). If the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step S833).

  If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step S833; N), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step S834), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S838), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, the transmission timings of the interval command and the round command that are characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
In the case of the present embodiment, in the above-described processing for opening the big prize opening (see FIG. 58), if the big prize opening information is not the upper big prize opening short opening pattern (upper big prize opening opening patterns 1 to 3), Regardless of whether or not the current round is the final round, an interval command is prepared. When the current round is the final round in the above-described winning prize remaining ball processing (see FIG. 61), an ending command is issued. Configured to prepare.

Therefore, if the current round is not the final round, an interval command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the end of the current round, as shown in FIG. 89 (a).
On the other hand, if the current round is the final round, an interval command is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the end of the current round (final round), as shown in FIG. Then, an ending command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 when the winning prize remaining ball processing time has elapsed.
That is, the interval instruction means (game control device 100) is configured to generate interval information (interval command) at the end of the round game, regardless of how many round games of the predetermined number of round games have ended. Has been.
Further, the ending instruction means (game control device 100) generates ending information (ending command) at the end of the remaining ball processing period (large winning opening remaining ball processing time) when all of the predetermined number of round games have ended. It is configured.

The conventional gaming machine is configured to transmit an interval command when the current round is not the final round in the processing during the big prize opening opening, and to transmit an ending command when the current round is the final round. Therefore, it is necessary to determine whether or not the current round is the final round every time the special winning opening is being opened.
On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to prepare an interval command regardless of whether or not the current round is the final round in the above-described special winning opening opening process (see FIG. 58). ing. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the current round is the final round in the special winning opening opening process, and the process is simplified, so that the control burden can be reduced.

When receiving the ending command, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute an effect (ending effect) for displaying the ending video on the display device 41 or the like. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) provides an effect (ending effect) for notifying the end of the special game state based on the ending information (ending command) instructed from the game control means (game control device 100). Configured to run.
Therefore, instead of performing the ending effect immediately after the end of the final round, a predetermined effect is performed during the period from the end of the final round until the winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses, and then the ending effect is performed. The player is not notified whether or not the big winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) is closed immediately after closing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, the effect control device 300 performs a predetermined effect after the end of the final round (16R), and then the ending When the command is received (that is, when the winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses), the ending effect is performed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the case of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, the effect control device 300 performs 6300 ms after the 1R short opening period (a period in which 52 ms is opened 16 times). In the first predetermined period of the closing period (the period of the same length as the winning ball remaining ball processing time), the predetermined effect (the same effect as the effect performed after the end of the final round of the upper winning hole opening / closing pattern 3) After that, an effect of displaying the promoted video on the display device 41 (a so-called jump-up bonus effect) is performed.

As described above, the opening / closing mode of the 1R short opening period in the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 is the same as the opening / closing mode of the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern 3. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, the same effect as the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is performed until the middle of the 6300 ms closing period after the short opening period. Or will it evolve from a gaming state where the opening time of the big prize opening is short (a gaming state where there are few games) to a gaming state where the opening time of the big prize opening is long (a game state where there are many games) , Making it difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest until the winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses.
Thus, in the present embodiment, in the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 3 and 4, the opening / closing pattern is recognized by the player not until the 1R short opening period but also during the subsequent closing period. It is hard to do.
When the ending command is prepared (set) in the process for opening the big prize opening as in the conventional case, the ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the end of 16R in FIG. If the promoted video is not displayed immediately after the game, the player can recognize that there is no promotion to the long opening pattern of the big prize opening.
On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since there is an “interval” for the extra winning port remaining ball processing time after the special winning opening is closed, the presence or absence of promotion can be expected in the “interval”. At that time, in order to produce “interval” corresponding to the time for processing the remaining winning ball in the winning a prize opening, the screen of the display device 41 is blackened (blackout), an image on which noise runs on the screen, It is also possible to produce effects such as freeze-displaying the image displayed on the screen immediately before the mouth is closed.

  That is, in the special gaming state, the first special gaming state in which the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted into the open state and the closed state by the first opening / closing pattern (upper large opening opening / closing pattern 3). A second special gaming state in which the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted into an open state and a closed state by a second opening / closing pattern (upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 4) including the first opening / closing pattern; In the second opening / closing pattern (upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4), the first opening / closing pattern (upper university winning opening opening / closing pattern 3) is performed first, and then the predetermined opening / closing pattern is used. The variable winning device 38) is configured to be converted between an open state and a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the case of the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, the effect control device 300 performs a predetermined effect after the end of the final round (11R), and then receives an ending command. Then (that is, when the winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses), an ending effect is performed.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the case of the lower grand prize opening / closing pattern 2, the effect control device 300 performs the first predetermined period (large prize winning opening) in the 1500 ms closing period after the end of 11R. In the same period as the remaining ball processing time), the predetermined effect (the same effect as the effect performed after the end of the final round of the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1) is performed, and then the ending effect is performed. Yes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), in the case of the lower grand prize opening / closing pattern 3, the effect control device 300 performs the first predetermined period (large prize winning opening) in the closing period of 13000ms after the end of 11R. In the same duration as the remaining ball processing time), the predetermined effect (the same effect as the effect performed after the end of the final round of the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1) is performed, and then the promotion effect (the so-called rank-up bonus) Production).

As described above, the opening / closing mode up to the end of 11R in the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 is the same as the opening / closing pattern of the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 and the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2. Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, the same effects as the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 and the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 are performed until the middle of the closing period of 13000 ms after the end of 11R. Thus, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the special gaming state ends or the gaming state with a small number of balls comes out, or the gaming state with many balls continues. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest until the winning prize remaining ball processing time elapses.
Thus, in this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern the lower large prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are not until the end of 11R but also during the subsequent closing period. ing.

  That is, in the special gaming state, the first special gaming state in which the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted into the open state and the closed state by the first opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 1). The second special game state in which the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted into the open state and the closed state by the second open / close pattern including the first open / close pattern (lower large winning opening open / close pattern 2, 3). In the second opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 and 3), the first opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 1) is followed by the predetermined opening / closing pattern. The (second special variation winning device 39) is configured to be converted into an open state and a closed state.

  The special gaming state includes a third special gaming state in which the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted into an open state and a closed state by a third opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 2). A variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted into an open state and a closed state by a fourth opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 3) including a common opening / closing pattern common to the third opening / closing pattern. There are four special gaming states, and in the third opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 2), the variable opening device (the second special variable winning device 39) is first a common opening / closing pattern and then a unique opening / closing pattern. ) Is converted into an open state and a closed state, and in the fourth opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 4), the opening / closing pattern is advantageous for the player over the common opening / closing pattern at first. Patter In down, variation winning device (second special variation winning device 39) is configured to be converted into an open state and a closed state.

Here, in the interval period between rounds, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses from the end of the round, and the remaining winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses. To the interval until the interval time elapses. In the case of this embodiment, since the winning ball remaining ball processing time is fixed to a predetermined time (for example, 1380 ms), the interval period is changed by changing the interval time as shown in FIG. 89 (b). It is configured to let you.
For example, when the big prize opening information is any one of the upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, 68 ms is selected as the interval time. As a result, the interval period becomes 1448 ms.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is such that the winning ball remaining ball processing time elapses from the end of the final round, and the remaining large winning port remains. A period from the lapse of the ball processing time to the ending time elapses. As described above, in the case of this embodiment, since the winning ball remaining ball processing time is fixed to a predetermined time (for example, 1380 ms), by changing the ending time as shown in FIG. , Is configured to change the ending period.
For example, when the special winning opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern 1, 21020 ms is selected as the ending time. As a result, the ending period becomes 22400 ms.

Next, the advance notice effect characterized by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect (preliminary notification effect) that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 42a, before the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect occurs, the execution of the pre-reading effect is notified. It is configured to perform the advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the lower part of the display area (display unit) of the display device 41, the upper limit number of the special figure start memory number (in this embodiment, the upper limit number of the first start memory number is four). Yes, since the upper limit number of the second start memory number is four, the upper limit number of the special figure start memory number is 8.) The same number of the decorative special figure start memory display areas 42 (hereinafter simply referred to as “start memory”). When the special figure start memory corresponding to the start memory display area 42 is generated, the decorative special figure start memory display 42a (hereinafter simply referred to as the display special area start memory display 42a) is set. When a special figure start memory corresponding to the start memory display area 42 has not been generated, a decorative special figure start memory non-display 42b (in the start memory display area 42) is displayed. Hereinafter, it is simply referred to as “no start memory display 42b”. It has become way.
Each time the special figure start memory is consumed, the start memory display 42a or the no start memory display 42b displayed in each of the eight start memory display areas 42 arranged in a line on the left and right is shifted one by one to the left. It is like that. That is, in the leftmost start memory display area 42, the start memory display 42a corresponding to the oldest special figure start memory among undigested (pending) special figure start memories is displayed.

FIG. 96 shows an example in which the number of special figure start memories stored (the number of holds) is three.
FIG. 96 shows an example in which a pre-reading effect is performed in the second start memory display area 42 from the left. That is, in FIG. 96, the display mode of the start memory display 42a displayed in the second start memory display area 42 from the left is a display mode different from the normal display mode. Although not particularly limited, in the case of the present embodiment, the image of the pre-reading effect mode (starting storage display 42a2 of the pre-reading effect mode) is an image of the plain normal display mode (starting storage display 42a1 of the normal display mode). The image has a pattern.
FIG. 96 shows an example in which the advance notice effect is performed in the third start memory display area 42 from the right. That is, in FIG. 96, the display mode of the start memory non-display 42b displayed in the third start memory display area 42 from the right is a display mode different from the normal display mode. Although not limited in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the image of the advance notice effect mode (the display without start memory 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) is the image of the normal display mode (the display 42b1 without start memory of the normal display form). ) To which a predetermined image is added.

FIG. 97 shows an example of the start memory display 42a and the no start memory display 42b in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 97 (a), as the start memory display 42a, an image of a normal display mode and images of pre-reading effect modes A to D are displayed. Specifically, as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the special figure start memory that was not won for the pre-reading effect, an image of the normal display mode (the start memory display 42a1 of the normal display mode) is displayed, and the special that was won for the pre-reading effect is displayed. As the start memory display 42a corresponding to the figure start memory, any one of the images of the prefetch effect modes A to D (the start memory display 42a2 of the prefetch effect mode) is displayed.
The start memory display 42a corresponding to the first start memory and the start memory display 42a corresponding to the second start memory may be different in color and shape. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish and recognize information such as the number of holdings and pre-reading information in the first starting memory and information such as the number of holdings and pre-reading information in the second starting memory by the start memory display 42a.

Further, as the display without start memory 42b, an image in the normal display mode (display without start memory in the normal display mode 42b1) and an image in the advance notice effect mode (the display without start memory 42b2 in the advance notice effect mode) are displayed. It has become. Although not particularly limited, in the case of the present embodiment, an image of the closed bag is displayed as the display 42b1 without starting memory in the normal display mode, and the closed bag is displayed as the display 42b2 without starting memory in the previous notice effect mode. The image is configured to display a silhouette image (an image showing the silhouette of the start memory display 42a to make it appear as if the start memory display 42a is hidden behind the bag) and an image with a balloon image added thereto. Yes.
When the special figure start memory is generated, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory (that is, the start memory display corresponding to the special figure start memory). In 42a (starting memory display area 42 in which the starting memory display 42a indicating the special figure starting memory) is displayed, an effect is given such that the start memory display 42a appears behind the bag and the bag opens. Thus, the start memory display 42b is switched to the start memory display 42a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start memory (special map start memory) of the special figure fluctuation display game is stored in the special chart start memory of the prefetch low probability zone and the prefetch effect is executed more frequently than the prefetch low probability zone. The pre-reading high probability zone special map start memory is divided into a plurality of (eight) start memory display areas 42, and the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the pre-read high probability zone special map start memory is advanced. The advance notice effect is performed, and the advance notice effect is not performed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special drawing start memory of the prefetch low probability zone. This makes it difficult for the advance notice effect to be a gasse effect.
That is, the production control device 300 has a first game period (pre-reading low probability zone) and a second game period (the pre-notification production (prefetching production)) having a higher probability than the first game period (pre-reading low probability zone). It is possible to switch between the prefetch high probability zone). In the case of the present embodiment, the specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) is configured to be able to execute the specific effect (advance notice effect) only in the second game period (prefetch high probability zone). .

FIG. 98 shows an example of the prefetch low probability zone and the prefetch high probability zone in the present embodiment.
In the case of the present embodiment, the start memory of the special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure fluctuation display game for the first rotation (first game)) that is executed first after the gaming machine 10 is turned on or after the short-time state is ended. From the pre-read low probability zone special chart start memory. Then, a process for setting 100 special figure start memories as a special figure start memory for a prefetch low-probability zone, and a process for using ten special figure start memories as a special figure start memory for a pre-read high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone); Are alternately performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98, the special figure variation display game that is executed first after a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or at the end of the short time state) A special figure variation display game is used, the start memory of the special figure variation display game at the 1st to 100th rotations is the special figure start memory of the look-ahead low probability zone, and the start memory of the special map variation display game at the 101st to 110th rotations is the prefetch high probability. Special chart start memory of the zone, start memory of the special figure fluctuation display game at the 111th to 210th rotations is a special look start memory of the look-ahead low probability zone, and start memory of the special figure fluctuation display game at the 211th to 220th rotations is a high prefetch probability. Special zone start memory for the zone, and so on. Hereinafter, the “starting memory of the special rotation display game at the nth rotation” is simply referred to as “starting memory at the nth rotation”.

Note that the predetermined timing is not limited to when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or at the end of the short-time state, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Further, the number of special figure start memories in the prefetch low probability zone is not limited to 100, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Further, the number of special figure start memories in the prefetch high probability zone is not limited to ten, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such an effect will be described. Control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 91 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 91, the process at the start of the program is first performed.
In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step D1), the CPU is initialized (step D2), and the VDP 312 is initialized (step D3).
Next, an interrupt is permitted (step D4), display data generation is permitted (step D5), a random number seed is set (step D6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step D6). Step D7).

In the main processing, next, loop processing is performed as main loop processing.
In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step D8), and an effect button input process (step D9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. . The input from the effect button 25 is read in the timer interrupt process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, a process of changing the effect content is performed.
Next, a random number update process for updating the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game (step D10), a received command check process for analyzing the command from the game control device 100 and taking a response (step D11) Then, the effect display editing process (step D12) is performed to set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step D13). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.
Next, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing (step D14). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching).
If it is determined in step D14 that it is not the frame switching timing (step D14; No), step D14 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D14 that it is the frame switching timing (step D14; Yes), screen drawing is instructed (step D15).

  Next, a sound control process (step D16) for performing control related to output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step D17) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. ), A movable body control process (step D18) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed, and the process returns to step D8.

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process (step D11) in the main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 92, in the received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands. (Step D101), it is determined whether the received command reception number is not "0" (Step D102).
If it is determined in step D102 that the number of received commands is “0” (step D102; No), the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D102 that the number of received commands is not “0” (step D102; Yes), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step D103).
Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step D104), the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “31” (step D105), and the command is copied for the number of received commands. It is determined whether or not it has been completed (step D106). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.
If it is determined in step D106 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step D106; N), the process returns to step D104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D106 that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step D106; Yes), the contents of the command area are loaded (step D107), and the received command is analyzed. Command analysis processing (step D108) is performed.
Next, the address of the command area is updated (step D109), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step D110).
If it is determined in step D110 that the command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step D110; No), the process returns to step D107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D110 that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step D110; Yes), the received command check process is terminated.
As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (step D108) in the above-described received command check process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 93, in the received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step D121).

Next, it is determined whether or not MODE is in a normal range (step D122).
If it is determined in step D122 that MODE is not in the normal range (step D122; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D122 that MODE is in the normal range (step D122; Yes), it is determined whether ACT is in the normal range (step D123).
If it is determined in step D123 that the ACT is not in the normal range (step D123; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D123 that the ACT is in the normal range (step D123; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step D124).

If it is determined in step D124 that the ACT for the MOED is not a correct combination (step D124; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D124 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step D124; Yes), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step D125).
If it is determined in step D125 that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step D125; Yes), the variable command process (step D126) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D125 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step D125; No), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step D127).
If it is determined in step D127 that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step D127; Yes), the jackpot command processing (step D128) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D127 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (step D127; No), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol system command (step D129).
If it is determined in step D129 that MODE is within the range of symbol-based commands (step D129; Yes), symbol-based command processing (step D130) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D129 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step D129; No), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step D131).
If it is determined in step D131 that MODE is within the range of the single command (step D131; Yes), the single command processing (step D132) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D131 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step D131; No), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetch command (step D133).
If it is determined in step D133 that MODE is within the range of the prefetch command (step D133; Yes), prefetch command processing (step D134) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D133 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetch command (step D133; No), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Advance notice setting process]
Next, the advance notice setting process performed in the effect display editing process (step D12) in the main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 94, in the advance notice setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter that counts the number of executions (number of rotations) of the special figure variation display game has been set (step D201). .
When it is determined in step D201 that the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter has been set (step D201; Yes), it is determined whether or not the start information of the special figure variation display game has been received (step D202).
When it is determined in step D202 that the start information of the special figure variation display game has been received (step D202; Yes), the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter is updated by -1 (step D203), and the prefetch frequent occurrence zone after the update is updated. It is determined whether or not the monitoring counter is “0” (step D204).

When it is determined in step D204 that the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter is “0” (step D204; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag (ON) (step D205).
When it is determined in step D205 that there is a prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag (step D205; Yes), the prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag is turned off (step D206), and “100” is set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter (step D205). D207), the advance notice setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D205 that there is no prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag (step D205; No), the prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag is turned on (step D208), and "10" is set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter. (Step D209), the advance notice setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step D204 that the prefetch frequent occurrence zone start timer is not “0” (step D204; No), it is determined whether or not there is a prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag (ON) (step D210).
If it is determined in step D210 that there is a pre-read frequent occurrence zone flag (step D210; Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal power support is being performed (during the time reduction state) (step D211).

  If it is determined in step D211 that the power transmission support is not in progress (step D211; No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is won (step D212). Here, the method for determining whether or not the advance notice effect has been won can be arbitrarily selected as appropriate. For example, the special figure change display game to be started (that is, the start information determined to have been received in step D202) The advance notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed based on the conditions such as hit / miss of the special figure fluctuation display game) and the effect mode, and the determination is made based on the lottery result. Alternatively, the winning timing of the advance notice effect may be set in advance, and determination may be made based on whether or not the current step D212 is the winning timing of the advance notice effect.

If it is determined in step D212 that the advance notice effect has been won (step D212; Yes), the advance performed in the target start storage display area 42 (in the present embodiment, the rightmost start storage display area 42). A notice effect is set (step D213), and the advance notice setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D210 that there is no prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag (step D210; No), if it is determined in step D211 that power transmission support is in progress (step D211; Yes), or in step D212, If it is determined that the advance notice effect has not been won (step D212; No), the advance notice setting process is terminated without setting the advance notice effect. Accordingly, in the case of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect is not executed when there is no prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag (OFF), when the power transmission support is being performed, and when the advance notice effect is not won.

If it is determined in step D202 that the start information of the special figure variation display game has not been received (step D202; No), it is determined whether or not the end information of the general power support (short time state) has been received. (Step D214).
If it is determined in step D214 that the end information of the ordinary power support has not been received (step D214; No), the advance notice setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D214 that end information of the ordinary power support has been received (step D214; Yes), the prefetch frequent zone flag is turned off (step D215), and “92” is set in the prefetch frequent zone monitor counter. After setting (step D216), the advance notice setting process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step D201 that the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter has not been set (step D201; No), that is, when the advance notice setting process is the first notice setting process performed first after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag is turned off (step D215), the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter is set to “92” (step D216), and the advance notice setting process is terminated.

Here, a specific flow of the advance notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
First, when the prefetch frequent zone monitoring counter has not been set (that is, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on), or when the end information of the ordinary power support (short time state) is received (that is, when the short time state ends) ), The prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag is turned off (step D215), and “92” is set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter (step D216). Thus, the special figure start memory of the look-ahead low-probability zone from the start memory of the special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure fluctuation display game for the first rotation) which is executed first after the gaming machine 10 is turned on or after the short-time state is ended. become.

  Thereafter, every time the special figure variation display game is started (that is, the special figure start memory is digested), the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter is updated by −1 (step D203). (Step D204; Yes). Here, since “92” is set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter, the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter becomes “0” at the start of the special figure change display game at the 92nd rotation (step D204; Yes). The flag is turned on (step D208), and “10” is set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter (step D209). Thus, the special figure start memory of the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone) from the special figure start memory (that is, the start memory of the 101st rotation) that can be generated by the start of the next 93th special figure variation display game. become.

  At the start of the next special rotation game for the 93rd rotation, the pre-read frequent zone monitoring counter is updated by -1 (step D203). The advance notice effect mode is set in the no start memory display 42b displayed in 42 (in the present embodiment, the rightmost start storage display area 42) (step D213). As a result, the display without start memory 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode is displayed in the target start memory display area 42.

If the number of stored special figure start memories (holding number) reaches 8 during the execution of the special figure change display game at the 93rd rotation, the start memory display 42a corresponding to the start memory at the 94th to 101st rotations is displayed. Is done. At that time, the start memory display 42a corresponding to the start memory of the 101st rotation is displayed in the rightmost start memory display area 42. In the case of the present embodiment, the starting memory at the 94th to 100th rotations is a special chart starting memory of the look-ahead low probability zone, and the starting memory at the 101st rotation is a special chart starting memory of the lookahead high probability zone, so the 93rd rotation From the start to the end of the special figure variation display game, the rightmost start memory display area 42 becomes the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory of the prefetch high probability zone.
Here, in the present invention, when the special figure start memory is generated, the start memory display area 42 in which the start memory display 42a corresponding to the special figure start memory is displayed is used as the start memory display area corresponding to the special figure start memory. This is called area 42. Therefore, when the special figure start memory is generated, the start memory display 42a is displayed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory, and the special figure start memory is not generated. In this case, the display 42b without start memory is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the advance notice display effect is performed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special chart start memory of the prefetch high probability zone, and the start memory display area corresponding to the special chart start memory of the prefetch low probability zone. At 42, the advance notice effect is not performed.
Accordingly, when the advance notice effect is won at the start of the 93rd special figure variation display game, the start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode is displayed in the rightmost start memory display area 42, The advance notice effect is executed in the rightmost start storage display area 42. In addition, when the special figure change display game at the 93rd rotation is not started, if the advance notice effect is not won, the start memory display area 42b1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the rightmost start memory display area 42. The advance notice effect is not executed in the rightmost start storage display area 42.

  Thus, the start memory corresponding to the 101st rotation start memory (the special figure start memory of the look-ahead high probability zone that occurs first after the gaming machine 10 is turned on or after the short-time state is finished). At the time when the display area 42 appears, “92” is set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter in step D216 so that the advance notice effect can be executed in the start memory display area 42. Therefore, the value set in the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter in step D216 can be appropriately changed according to the number of special figure start memories in the prefetch low probability zone and the upper limit number of special figure start memories. In addition, the value set in the prefetch frequent zone monitoring counter in step D207 can be appropriately changed according to the number of special chart start memories in the prefetch low probability zone, and is set in the prefetch frequent zone monitoring counter in step D209. The value can be appropriately changed according to the number of special figure start memories in the prefetch high probability zone.

At the start of the next 94th special figure variation display game, the pre-read frequent zone monitoring counter is updated by -1 (step D203), and if the advance notice effect is won (step D212; Yes), the target start memory display area The advance notice effect mode is set in the no start memory display 42b displayed in 42 (in the present embodiment, the rightmost start storage display area 42) (step D213).
During execution of the 94th rotation special figure variation display game, the rightmost (first from right) start memory display area 42 is the start corresponding to the 102nd rotation start memory (special chart start memory in the pre-reading high probability zone). The second start memory display area 42 from the right is the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the 101 th start memory (special chart start memory in the pre-reading high probability zone).

  Since whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the start memory of the 101st rotation (step D212) was performed at the start of the special figure change display game of the 93rd rotation, here, It is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the start memory of the 102nd rotation (that is, at the start of the 94th rotation special figure variation display game). When it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the start memory at the 102nd rotation, that is, when the advance notice effect is won, the advance notice effect mode is displayed in the rightmost start memory display area 42. No start memory display 42b2 is displayed, and the advance notice effect is executed in the rightmost start memory display area 42. At this time, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the start memory of the 101st rotation at the start of the 93rd rotation special figure variation display game, If it has not occurred, the start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode is also displayed in the second start memory display area 42 from the right, and the advance notice effect is executed.

  Thereafter, at the start of the 102nd rotation special figure variation display game, the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter becomes “0” (step D204; Yes), the prefetch frequent occurrence zone flag is turned off (step D206), and the prefetch frequent occurrence zone monitoring counter. Is set to "100" (step D207). As a result, the special figure start memory of the pre-reading low probability zone is changed from the special figure start memory (that is, the start memory of the 111th rotation) that can be generated by the start of the next 103th special figure change display game.

That is, the production control device 300 is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100) among the hold display units (start memory display area 42) arranged on the display unit corresponding to the predetermined number. Start storage display means for displaying a hold display image (start storage display 42a) in a predetermined display manner on the hold display section corresponding to the start storage.
Further, the effect control device 300 can execute a specific effect (advance notice effect) that displays a specific effect image (no start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect aspect) on the hold display unit (start memory display area 42). This is a production execution means. Then, the specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) starts a specific effect image (advance notice effect mode) on the hold display portion (start memory display area 42) where the hold display image (start memory display 42a) is not displayed. The display without memory 42b2) is displayed, and then the start memory corresponding to at least the hold display section (start memory display area 42) displaying the specific effect image is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100). Until this is done, the display of the specific effect image is continued.

[Prefetch command processing]
Next, the prefetch command processing (step D134) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. This prefetch command processing is executed when a special drawing start memory is generated and a prefetch command (such as a prefetch symbol command or a prefetch variation pattern command) prepared accordingly is received.
As shown in FIG. 95, in the prefetch command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the target special figure start memory is a special figure start memory of a prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone) (step D301).

If it is determined in step D301 that the target special figure start memory is a special figure start memory of the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone) (step D301; Yes), the special figure based on the target special figure start memory is determined. It is determined whether or not the result of the variable display game is a big hit (step D302).
If it is determined in step D302 that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit (step D302; Yes), for example, the prefetch effect distribution table 1 shown in FIG. Is set (step D303), and the process proceeds to step D308.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D302 that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is not a big hit (step D302; No), that is, if it is a loss, for example, the prefetching shown in FIG. The effect distribution table 1 (at the time of disconnection) is set (step D304), and the process proceeds to step D308.

In Step D301, when it is determined that the target special figure start memory is not the special chart start memory of the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone) (Step D301; No), that is, the target special figure start memory is low in the prefetch memory. In the case of the special zone start memory of the probability zone, it is determined whether or not the result of the special map fluctuation display game based on the target special map start memory is a big hit (step D305).
When it is determined in step D305 that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit (step D305; Yes), for example, the prefetch effect distribution table 2 shown in FIG. 99 (at the big hit) Is set (step D306), and the process proceeds to step D308.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D305 that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is not a big hit (step D305; No), that is, if it is a loss, for example, the look-ahead shown in FIG. The effect distribution table 2 (at the time of disconnection) is set (step D307), and the process proceeds to step D308.

  In step D308, it is determined whether or not the target special figure start memory is won for the pre-reading effect (step D308). Specifically, the start-up memory is based on the pre-reading effect distribution table set in step D303, step D304, step D306, or step D307, pre-determination result information (pre-read system command) related to the target special figure start-up memory, and the like. When the display mode of the display 42a is selected and the normal display mode is selected as the display mode, it is determined that the prefetch effect is not won, and when any of the prefetch effect modes A to D is selected as the display mode It is determined that the prefetch effect is won.

Here, the pre-reading effect distribution table is for determining whether to perform the pre-reading effect, and the contents of the effect when the pre-reading effect is performed (display mode of the start memory display 42a). In the prefetching effect distribution table 1 set when the target special figure start memory is the special read start memory of the prefetch high probability zone, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit. There are a pre-reading effect distribution table 1 (at the time of big hit) set in the case and a pre-reading effect distribution table 1 (at the time of loss) set when the result is out of place.
As shown in FIG. 99, the prefetch effect distribution table 1 (at the time of big hit) and the prefetch effect distribution table 1 (at the time of loss) have different display mode selection rates. In the prefetch effect distribution table 1 (at the time of failure), the selection rate of the normal display mode (that is, no execution of the prefetch effect) and the prefetch effect mode A which is the least reliable prefetch effect mode is high. On the other hand, in the prefetch effect distribution table 1 (at the time of big hit), the selection rate of prefetch effect modes B to D, which are relatively reliable prefetch effect modes, is high.

In addition, the prefetch effect distribution table 2 set when the target special figure start memory is the special read start memory of the prefetch low-probability zone, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit. There is a prefetching effect distribution table 2 (at the time of big hit) set when the result is, and a prefetching effect distribution table 2 (when at the time of loss) that is set when the result is out of place.
As shown in FIG. 99, the prefetch effect distribution table 2 (at the time of big hit) and the prefetch effect distribution table 2 (at the time of loss) have different display mode selection rates. In the prefetch effect distribution table 2 (at the time of losing), the selection rate of the normal display mode (that is, no execution of the prefetch effect) is high, and the prefetch effect mode is hardly selected. In the prefetch effect distribution table 2 (at the time of big hit), the selection rate of the normal display mode (that is, no execution of the prefetch effect) and the prefetch effect mode D which is the most reliable prefetch effect mode is high.

If it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect has been won (step D308; Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory ( Step D309).
When it is determined in step D309 that the advance notice effect is being executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D309; Yes), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. A special prefetch effect mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D310), and the prefetch command processing is terminated. Thereby, the start memory display 42a3 (see FIG. 101 (b)) of the special prefetch effect mode is displayed as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D309 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D309; No), it corresponds to the target special figure start memory. The pre-reading effect mode (any of the pre-reading effect modes A to D) selected as the display mode is set in the start memory display 42a to be performed (step D311), and the pre-reading command processing is terminated. Thereby, the start memory display 42a2 of the pre-reading effect mode is displayed as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory.

If it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect is not won (step D308; No), whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory. (Step D312).
If it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is being executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; Yes), the advance notice effect is cleared (step D313). ), The normal display mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated. Thereby, the advance notice effect executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory is cleared (stopped), and the normal display is displayed as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory. The start memory display 42a1 of the aspect is displayed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; No), the target special figure start memory is supported. The normal display mode is set in the start memory display 42a to be executed (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated. As a result, the start memory display 42a1 in the normal display mode is displayed as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory.

Here, an example of the pre-reading effect and the advance notice effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101.
FIG. 100 shows an example of the advance notice effect.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), first, five special figure start memories are reserved, and no pre-reading effect or advance notice effect is executed in any of the start memory display areas 42. A special figure variation display game is being executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), when the special figure fluctuation display game is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the start memory display 42a and the start memory are displayed. The none display 42b is shifted one by one to the left, and a new start memory non-display 42b in the rightmost start memory display area 42 appears. In this example, the special figure start memory corresponding to the rightmost start memory display area 42 (this special figure start memory has not yet occurred) is a special figure start memory in the pre-reading high probability zone, and is used for the advance notice effect. I am elected. Therefore, in the rightmost start memory display area 42, a start no-memory display 42b2 (in this example, a closed eyelid image and a silhouette image (襖An image showing a silhouette of the start memory display 42a to make it appear as if the start memory display 42a is hidden behind, and a speech balloon image of “what happens here!” ) Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), when the special figure fluctuation display game is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the start memory display 42a and the start memory are displayed. The none display 42b is shifted one by one to the left, and a new start memory non-display 42b in the rightmost start memory display area 42 appears. Therefore, the display without start memory 42b that newly appears at the time of FIG. 100 (c) (the display without start memory 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) moves to the second start memory display area 42 from the right. At this time, as in this example, the display mode may be changed by changing the contents of the speech image speech. In this example, the special figure start memory corresponding to the rightmost start storage display area 42 (this special figure start memory has not yet occurred) is the special figure start memory of the pre-reading high probability zone. Not elected. Accordingly, in the rightmost start memory display area 42, a start memory without display 42b1 (in this example, only a closed eyelid image) is displayed as a new start memory non-display 42b.

  That is, the start memory display means (production control device 300) gives the player the execution contents of the variable display game for the start memory stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game. When it is determined whether or not to make a suggestive advance notification effect (prefetching effect), and when it is determined to be an object of the prior notification effect (prefetching effect), a hold display unit (starting memory display area) corresponding to the start memory 42) is configured to display the hold display image (start-up storage display 42a) in a display mode (pre-read effect mode) based on pre-determination result information (pre-read symbol command, pre-read variation pattern command, etc.).

FIG. 101 shows an example of the prefetching effect and the advance notice effect.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), first, four special figure start memories are reserved, and the advance notice effect is executed in the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right. In the other start memory display area 42, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state where neither the pre-reading effect nor the advance notice effect is executed.
If a new special figure start memory is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right, that is, the start memory display area 42 in which the advance notice effect is executed is displayed. A start memory display 42a corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed.
At that time, when the new special figure start memory is won for the prefetch effect, a start memory display 42a (a start memory display 42a3 of the special prefetch effect mode) as shown in FIG. 101 (b) is displayed. When the special figure start memory is not won for the pre-reading effect, a start memory display 42a (a normal display mode start memory display 42a1) as shown in FIG. 101 (e) is displayed.

  In this example, the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 (in this example, the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right) corresponding to the target special figure start memory (the new special figure start memory). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the new special figure starting memory is won for the prefetching effect, the special prefetching effect is used as the starting memory display 42a corresponding to the new special figure starting memory. The start memory display 42a3 of the aspect is displayed. Here, as the start memory display 42a3 of the special prefetch effect mode, an image of the prefetch effect mode (any one of the prefetch effect modes A to D) selected based on the prefetch effect distribution table or the like and a part of the image of the advance notice effect mode (In this example, a balloon image) is displayed. That is, when the target special figure start memory is won for the pre-reading effect, the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory performs an effect that combines the pre-reading effect and the advance notice effect. It has become. Thereby, a player's expectation can be raised rather than the case where only a prefetch effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the special figure fluctuation display game is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in FIG. 101 (d), the start memory display 42a and the start memory are displayed. The none display 42b is shifted one by one to the left. Therefore, the start memory display 42a3 of the special prefetch effect mode that appears at the time of FIG. 101 (b) moves to the fifth start memory display area 42 from the right. That is, when the pre-reading effect is won, the advance notice effect is executed even after the pre-reading effect is executed, and moves together with the pre-reading effect according to the digestion of the special figure start memory.

  In this example, the advance notice effect is provided in the start memory display area 42 (in this example, the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right) corresponding to the target special figure start memory (the new special figure start memory). As shown in FIG. 101 (e), when the new special figure start memory is not won for the pre-reading effect, the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed. The advance notice effect executed in step S3 is cleared, and the start memory display 42a1 in the normal display mode is displayed as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the new special figure start memory. Here, as shown in FIGS. 101 (e) to 101 (g), until the next special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure fluctuation display game executed at the time of occurrence of the new special figure start memory is started, An image suggesting that the pre-reading effect is not executed (in this example, a speech balloon image of “scene ...”) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest the cause that the advance notice effect has been cleared, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust that the advance notice effect has been suddenly cleared.

That is, the specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) has a start memory corresponding to the hold display unit (start memory display area 42) displaying the specific effect image (no start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode). Is stored in the start memory hold display means (game control device 100), the specific effect image is changed to a different mode depending on whether or not the start memory is a target of a prior notification effect (pre-read effect). It is configured to let you.
In the case of the present embodiment, the specific effect executing means (effect control device 300) is displayed on the hold display unit (starting memory display area 42) displaying the specific effect image (the display without start memory 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode). When the corresponding start memory is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100), and the start memory is a target of a prior notification effect (prefetch effect), at least one of the specific effect images Are displayed together with the hold display image in the display mode (the start storage display 42a2 in the pre-reading effect mode) based on the pre-determination result information displayed by the start memory display means (effect control device 300).
On the other hand, the start memory corresponding to the hold display unit (start memory display area 42) displaying the specific effect image (the start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100). If it is stored, and the start-up memory is not the subject of the prior notification effect (prefetch effect), the specific effect image is erased.
As described above, in the present embodiment, an indefinite effect (advance notice effect) is performed, and then, based on the information (pre-reading information) with respect to the start memory generated thereafter, the indefinite effect already performed is deterministic. It is configured to incorporate various effects (prefetch effects).
The advance notice effect is an effect of notifying the execution of the prefetch effect before the start memory that is the target of the prefetch effect is generated. Therefore, since it is not known what start memory is generated (whether the result is a hit or whether it is a target of the pre-reading effect), it is uncertain as the advance notice effect. Make a directing. Here, the “indeterminate effect” is an effect that is not an effect that suggests the determination of a big hit.
After performing the indefinite effect (advance notice effect), after the start memory actually occurs, the content of the effect is corrected, so that the content of the effect becomes fluid and the player obtains the final result of the effect content. It becomes difficult to predict. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a state of interest up to the moment when the result of the variable display game is derived.
Also, in recent gaming machines, the occurrence of prefetch effects occupies most of the big hit reliability, and if the prefetch effects do not occur, the player's expectation for the variable display game is reduced. is there. On the other hand, it is possible to solve such a problem by performing a preliminary announcement effect and predicting the final result of the effect contents as in the present embodiment.

<Modification 1>
Modification 1 of this embodiment will be described.
When the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory, if the target special figure start memory is not won for the prefetch effect, the start memory display area 42 Instead of clearing the advanced advance notice effect being executed, the advanced advance notice effect may be executed in the other start-up storage display area 42.

[Prefetch command processing]
In the first modification, the prefetch command processing shown in FIG. 102 is performed instead of the prefetch command processing shown in FIG.
In the prefetch command processing of the first modification, as shown in FIG. 102, when it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect has not been won (step D308; No), it corresponds to the target special figure start memory. It is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 (step D312).
If it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; No), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. The normal display mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is being executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; Yes), the target special figure start memory is supported. Whether or not the next start memory display area 42 (next empty hold) of the start memory display area 42 to be within the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone), that is, the next start memory display area 42 is also prefetch high probability It is determined whether or not the start memory display area 42 corresponds to the special map start memory of the zone (step D321).
If it is determined in step D321 that the next start memory display area 42 is not within the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone) (step D321; No), that is, the next start memory display area 42 is a special feature of the prefetch low probability zone. If it is the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the figure start memory, the advance notice effect executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory is cleared (step D313), and the target special display is performed. The normal display mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the figure start memory (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step D321 that the next start memory display area 42 is also in the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone) (step D321; Yes), that is, the next start memory display area 42 is also prefetch high probability. In the case of the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory of the zone, the start memory displayed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory is set as the advance notice effect mode setting destination. The display is moved from the none display 42b to the next start memory no display 42b displayed in the next start memory display area 42 (step D323), and the normal display mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory. (Step D314), the prefetch command processing is terminated. Thereby, the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 next to the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory. In this modification, when the advance notice effect is already executed in the next start memory display area 42, the next start memory display area 42 may be in the prefetch high probability zone (prefetch frequent occurrence zone). For example, the setting destination of the advance notice effect that has already been executed is moved to the next start-up storage display area 42 and the pre-read notice effect that has already been executed is not cleared. For example, even if the next start-up storage display area 42 is in the pre-read high probability zone (pre-read frequent occurrence zone), the pre-announcement effect that has already been executed may be cleared. .

Here, an example of the advance notice effect in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), first, four special figure start memories are reserved, and the advance notice effect is executed in the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right. In the other start memory display area 42, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state where neither the pre-reading effect nor the advance notice effect is executed.
If a new special figure start memory is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right, that is, the start memory display area 42 in which the advance notice effect is executed is displayed. A start memory display 42a corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed.

At that time, if the new special figure start memory is not won for the pre-reading effect, the special figure start memory generated after the new special figure start memory (this special figure start memory has not yet been generated). No) is the special chart start memory of the prefetch high probability zone, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the start memory display 42a corresponding to the new special chart start memory is the start memory of the normal display mode. A display 42a1 is displayed. Further, an image (in this example, a speech balloon image of “scene ...”) indicating that the pre-reading effect is not executed is displayed, and the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed. An effect is executed as if the advance notice effect being executed is cleared.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the start memory display area 42 next to the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the new special figure start memory (that is, next to the new special figure start memory is generated). A prefetch notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42) corresponding to the special figure start memory. Thus, by performing in the next start memory display area 42 without clearing the pre-reading notice effect, it is suppressed that the interest of a game will fall.

<Modification 2>
A second modification of the present embodiment will be described.
When the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory, if the target special figure start memory is not won for the prefetch effect, it is as if the prefetch effect is won It is also possible to configure so as to execute such an effect (pre-read gasse effect).

[Prefetch command processing]
In the second modification, the prefetch command processing shown in FIG. 104 is performed instead of the prefetch command processing shown in FIG.
In the prefetch command processing of the second modification, as shown in FIG. 104, when it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect has not been won (step D308; No), it corresponds to the target special figure start memory. It is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 (step D312).
If it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; No), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. The normal display mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is being executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; Yes), the target special figure start memory is supported. A special display mode is set in the start memory display 42a to be executed (step D331), and the prefetch command is terminated. Thereby, the advance notice effect executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory is cleared, and the start of the special display mode is performed as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory. A memory display 42a4 (see FIG. 105 (b)) is displayed.

Here, an example of the advance notice effect in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), first, four special figure start memories are reserved, and the advance notice effect is executed in the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right. In the other start memory display area 42, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state where neither the pre-reading effect nor the advance notice effect is executed.
If a new special figure start memory is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right, that is, the start memory display area 42 in which the advance notice effect is executed is displayed. A start memory display 42a corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed.

  At that time, if the new special figure start memory is not won for the pre-reading effect, as shown in FIG. The start memory display 42a4 of the aspect is displayed. Here, as the start storage display 42a4 of the special display mode, an image of the prefetch effect mode (prefetch effect mode A) having the lowest reliability, a part of the image of the advance notice effect mode (in this example, a balloon image), A combined image is displayed. When the special figure fluctuation display game is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started, the start memory display 42a4 of the special display mode is also shifted to the left by one.

Thus, the start memory display 42a4 in the special display mode and the start memory display 42a3 in the special prefetch effect mode shown in FIG. 101 (b) or the like (that is, in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special map start memory) When the notice effect is executed, the start memory display 42a) displayed when the target special figure start memory is won for the pre-read effect is visually the same, and any start memory is stored by the player. It is difficult to recognize whether it is the display 42a.
The difference between the start memory display 42a4 in the special display mode and the start memory display 42a3 in the special prefetch effect mode is that the start memory display 42a3 in the special prefetch effect mode is selected as the display mode based on the prefetch effect distribution table or the like. The start memory display 42a4 in the special display mode is not displayed in the mode (normal display mode) selected as the display mode, while the mode (any one of the pre-reading effect modes A to D) is displayed. is there. That is, when the normal display mode is selected as the display mode, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not won, so the display should actually be displayed in the normal display mode, but the special display mode is set. Since it is displayed in a mode different from the normal display mode, the prefetch information suggested by the start memory display 42a4 in the special display mode is different from the actual prefetch information.

<Modification 3>
A third modification of the present embodiment will be described.
When the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory, the pending special figure start memory generated before the target special figure start memory satisfies the predetermined condition. It is also possible to configure to execute a special mode effect.
Further, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit, the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory is advanced in the start memory display area 42. It is also possible to configure to execute a notice effect.

[Prefetch command processing]
In the third modification, the prefetch command processing shown in FIG. 106 is performed instead of the prefetch command processing shown in FIG.
In the prefetch command processing of the third modification, as shown in FIG. 106, when the prefetch effect distribution table 1 (big hit) is set (step D303), or when the prefetch effect distribution table 2 (big hit) is set ( Step D306), that is, if the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit, the advance notice setting flag is turned on (step D341), and the target special figure start memory is prefetched. It is determined whether or not the effect has been won (step D308).
Further, when the pre-reading effect distribution table 1 (at the time of detachment) is set (step D304), or when the pre-reading effect distribution table 2 (at the time of detachment) is set (step D307), that is, the special drawing start memory based on the target If the result of the figure variation display game is out of place, the advance notice setting flag is not turned on, and it is determined whether or not the target special figure start memory is won for the prefetch effect (step D308).

If it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect has been won (step D308; Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory ( Step D309).
When it is determined in step D309 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D309; No), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. The prefetch effect mode selected as the display mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D311), and the prefetch command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D309 that the advance notice effect is being executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D309; Yes), the target special figure start memory is stored. It is determined whether or not there is a special figure start memory satisfying a predetermined condition in the pending special figure start memory generated before (step D342). Here, in this modified example, a special figure fluctuation display game (a special figure fluctuation display game in which a result is a big hit or a special figure fluctuation display game in which a special reach occurs) is likely to generate a special result mode. The memory is the special figure starting memory that satisfies a predetermined condition, but this predetermined condition can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

If it is determined in step D342 that there is no special figure start memory satisfying the predetermined condition in the pending special figure start memory generated before the target special figure start memory (step D342; No), A special prefetch effect mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the special figure start memory (step D310), and the prefetch command is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D342 that there is a special figure start memory that satisfies the predetermined condition in the pending special figure start memory generated before the target special figure start memory (step D342; Yes). The special mode effect is set (step D343), the prefetch effect mode selected as the display mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D311), and the prefetch command processing is terminated. To do.

If it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect is not won (step D308; No), whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory. (Step D312).
If it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; No), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. A normal display mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is being executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; Yes), the target special figure start memory is stored. It is determined whether or not there is a special figure start memory satisfying a predetermined condition in the pending special figure start memory generated before (step D342). In this modification, the predetermined condition in step D344 and the predetermined condition in step D342 are the same, but the predetermined condition in step D344 and the predetermined condition in step D342 may be different. .

If it is determined in step D344 that there is no special figure start memory satisfying the predetermined condition in the pending special figure start memory generated before the target special figure start memory (step D342; No), The advance notice effect executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory is cleared (step D313), and the normal display mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory. (Step D314), the prefetch command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D344 that there is a special figure start memory that satisfies a predetermined condition in the pending special figure start memory generated before the target special figure start memory (step D344; Yes). Then, the special mode effect is set (step D345), the normal display mode is set in the start memory display 42a corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D314), and the prefetch command processing is terminated.
Thus, in this modification, when the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory, it is determined whether or not the target special figure start memory is won as the prefetch effect. Regardless, the special mode effect (see FIG. 108 (c)) can be executed if the pending special figure start memory generated before the target special figure start memory satisfies the predetermined condition.

[Advance notice setting process]
In the third modification, instead of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 94, the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 107 is performed.
In the advance notice setting process of the modified example 3, as shown in FIG. 107, it is first determined whether or not there is an advance notice setting flag (ON) (step D221).
If it is determined in step D221 that there is no advance notice setting flag (step D221; No), the processing after step D201 is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D221 that there is a advance notice setting flag (step D221; Yes), the target special figure start memory (the special figure start memory that was the object when the advance notice setting flag was turned on) ) Corresponding to the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the start memory display area 42 is set (step D222), the advance notice setting flag is turned off (step D223), and the advance notice setting process is performed. finish.
Thus, in this modification, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target special figure start memory is a big hit, the special figure generated after the target special figure start memory or the target special figure start memory is generated. Regardless of whether or not the figure start memory is a special chart start memory of a prefetch high probability zone, the advance notice effect is provided in the start memory display area 42 after the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory. Can be executed. When there are a plurality of start memory display areas 42 that are behind the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory, any of the start memory display areas 42 is selected. You may make a preliminary announcement.

Here, an example of the special mode effect in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), first, four special figure start memories are reserved, and the advance notice effect is executed in the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right. In the other start memory display area 42, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state where neither the pre-reading effect nor the advance notice effect is executed.
If a new special figure start memory is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, the fourth start memory display area 42 from the right, that is, the start memory display area 42 in which the advance notice effect is executed is displayed. A start memory display 42a corresponding to the new special figure start memory is displayed.

  At that time, when the new special figure start memory is not won for the pre-reading effect, and the pending special figure start memory generated before the new special figure start memory satisfies the predetermined condition ( That is, in the special figure start memory that is on hold, there is a start memory of a special figure fluctuation display game that results in a big hit or a special figure fluctuation display game start memory that causes a special reach) in FIG. As shown in b), at the end of the special figure variation display game, an image suggesting execution of the special mode effect (in this example, a speech balloon image of “Docker !!!!”) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), with the start of the next special figure variation display game, the execution of the special mode (in this example, “exciting mode”) effect is started, and the special figure start satisfying the predetermined condition is started. The execution of the special mode effect is continued until the special figure variation display game based on the memory is started. The special mode effect may be continued until the end of the variable display game based on the special figure start memory satisfying the predetermined condition, or may be continued until the end of the variable display game based on the special figure start memory satisfying the predetermined condition. Good. Further, the image suggesting the execution of the special mode effect is not only at the end of the special figure variation display game (FIG. 108 (b)), but also at the start of the next special figure variation display game (FIG. 108 (c)). May also be displayed.

  On the other hand, when the new special figure start memory is not won for the pre-reading effect, and the pending special figure start memory generated before the new special figure start memory does not satisfy the predetermined condition ( That is, in the case of the special figure starting memory that is on hold, there is no starting memory for the special figure fluctuation display game that results in a big hit or the special memory for the special figure fluctuation display game that causes special reach) (FIG. 108 ( As shown in (d) and (e), an image (in this example, “scene... that indicates that the pre-reading effect is not executed until the advance notice effect is cleared and the next special-figure display game is started”. (The speech balloon image “)” is displayed.

  In Modification 3, when the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory, the pending special figure start generated before the target special figure start memory is executed. Corresponds to the target special figure start memory when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the process of executing the special mode effect and the target special figure start memory is a big hit if the memory satisfies the predetermined condition Although both the process of executing the advance notice effect in the start memory display area 42 behind the start memory display area 42 to be performed are performed, of course, only one of the processes can be performed.

<Modification 4>
A modification of Modification 3 will be described.
Even if the special figure start memory is generated, the special display 42c is displayed without displaying the start memory display 42a1 in the normal display mode and the start memory display 42a2 in the pre-reading effect mode showing the special figure start memory. Is also possible.

[Prefetch command processing]
In the fourth modification, the prefetch command processing shown in FIG. 109 is performed instead of the prefetch command processing shown in FIG.
In the look-ahead command processing of the fourth modification, as shown in FIG. 109, it is first determined whether or not there is a special display execution flag (ON) (step D361).
If it is determined in step D361 that there is no special display execution flag (step D361; No), the processing after step D301 is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D361 that there is a special display execution flag (step D361; Yes), the pending special figure start memory that occurred before the target special figure start memory (in this modification example) In this case, the display mode of the special map start memory generated immediately before the target special map start memory is changed to a predetermined display mode (described later) (step D362), and the special display execution flag is turned off (step D362). D363), the processing after step D301 is performed.

If it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect has been won (step D308; Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory ( Step D309).
When it is determined in step D309 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D309; No), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. The pre-reading effect mode selected as the display mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D364), the special display mode setting process (step D365) is performed, and the pre-read command processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step D308 that the prefetch effect is not won (step D308; No), whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory. (Step D312).
If it is determined in step D312 that the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory (step D312; No), the start corresponding to the target special figure start memory is performed. A normal display mode is set in the memory display 42a (step D366), a special display mode setting process (step D367) is performed, and the prefetch command processing is terminated.

[Special display mode setting process]
Next, the special display mode setting process (steps D365 and D367) in the prefetch command process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 110, in the special display mode setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a special display execution flag (ON) (step D371).
If it is determined in step D371 that there is a special display execution flag (step D371; Yes), the special display mode setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step D371 that there is no special display execution flag (step D371; Yes), whether or not the target special figure start memory is won for the special display effect (the effect of displaying the special display 42c). (Step D372). Here, the method for determining whether or not the special display effect is won can be arbitrarily selected as appropriate. For example, it is determined whether or not the special display effect is to be performed based on a pre-reading command related to the target special figure start memory. Special display lottery processing is performed, and the determination may be made based on the lottery result. Also, the winning timing of the special display effect is set in advance, and this time step D372 is the winning timing of the special display effect. The determination may be made depending on whether or not there is.

If it is determined in step D372 that the target special figure start memory has not been won for the special display effect (step D372; No), the special display mode setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D372 that the target special figure start memory has been won for the special display effect (step D372; Yes), the pre-reading effect mode set in step D364 or the normal display mode set in step D366 is set. Instead, a special display mode is set (step D373). As a result, the special display 42c (see FIG. 111 (b)) is displayed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special figure start memory.
That is, the production control device 300 is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100) among the hold display units (start memory display area 42) arranged on the display unit corresponding to the predetermined number. Start storage display means for displaying a hold display image (start storage display 42a) in any one of a plurality of display modes (normal display mode and pre-reading effect mode) on the hold display unit corresponding to the start memory. .
Then, the start memory display means (production control device 300) holds the hold display image (special display 42c) having a special display mode different from the plurality of display modes (normal display mode and prefetch effect mode) at a predetermined rate. Display unit (starting storage display area 42).

Next, the display mode (the pre-reading effect mode set in step D364 or the normal display mode set in step D366) of the target special figure start memory is saved in a predetermined storage area (step D374), and the special display execution flag is turned on Then, the special display mode setting process is terminated (step D375).
Specifically, when the special display mode setting process is the special display mode setting process in step D365, the prefetch effect mode set in step D364 is saved in a predetermined storage area in step D374. If the special display mode setting process is the special display mode setting process in step D367, the normal display mode set in step D366 is saved in a predetermined storage area in step D374.

Then, in the prefetch command processing to be executed with the occurrence of the next special figure start memory, it is determined that there is a special display execution flag (step D361; Yes), and the target special figure start memory (the next special figure start memory) is determined. The display mode of the special figure start memory immediately before (memory) is changed to the display mode saved in step D374. Thereby, the special display 42c is changed to the start memory display 42a1 of the normal display mode that should be originally displayed and the start memory display 42a2 of the prefetch effect mode.
That is, the start memory display means (production control device 300) stores a new start memory in the start memory hold means (game control device 100) while displaying the hold display image (special display 42c) in the special display mode. As a result, the display mode of the hold display image is changed from the special display mode to any one of a plurality of display modes (normal display mode and pre-reading effect mode).

Here, an example of the special display effect in the modified example 4 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), two special figure start memories are reserved, and a prefetch effect, a preliminary announcement effect, and a special display effect are executed in any start memory display area 42. The special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in a state where it is not.
If a new special figure start memory (hereinafter referred to as “special figure start memory A”) is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, a start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory A ( In this example, in the third start memory display area 42 from the left, the start memory display 42a1 in the normal display mode or the start memory display 42a2 in the pre-reading effect mode (hereinafter referred to as the start memory display 42a corresponding to the special figure start memory A) "Starting memory displays 42a1, 42a2") are simply displayed.
However, when the advance notice effect is not executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory A and the special figure start memory A is won as the special display effect, FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, a special display 42c is displayed instead of the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A. Here, a part of the image of the advance notice effect mode (in this example, a closed eyelid image and a silhouette image) is displayed as the special display 42c.
In other words, the effect control device 300 displays a specific effect image (the start-up-no-start-up display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) in the hold display portion (start-up storage display area 42) where the hold-up display image (start-up storage display 42a) is not displayed. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect to be displayed (advance notice effect). Then, the start memory display means (effect control device 300) displays an image similar to the specific effect image (display without start memory 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) as the hold display image (special display 42c) of the special display mode. It is configured as follows.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), when a new special figure start memory (hereinafter referred to as “special figure start memory B”) is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, FIG. ), (E), the special display 42c is changed to the start memory display 42a1, 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A, and the start memory display 42a1, 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory B is changed. Is displayed. Specifically, FIG. 111 (d) is a display example in the case where neither the special figure start memory A nor the special figure start memory B is won for the pre-reading effect, and FIG. 112 (e) is a special figure start memory A. Is a display example when the pre-reading effect is won, but the special figure start memory B is not winning the pre-reading effect.

  Further, in this modification, when the special figure start memory B is generated, the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A and the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory B are simultaneously displayed. Since the display is configured to display, the special display 42c is not displayed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the target special map start memory (special map start memory A), for example, FIG. 112 (f), (g ), The display is made to display in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory (special figure start memory B) generated next to the target special figure start memory (special figure start memory A). Is also possible. Thus, when the special figure start memory A is generated, two start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 (the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A and the start corresponding to the special figure start memory B are obtained. It can be suggested that the memory displays 42a1, 42a2) are displayed.

In addition, another example of the special display effect in the modification 4 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), two special figure start memories are reserved, and a prefetch effect, a preliminary announcement effect, and a special display effect are executed in any start memory display area 42. The special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in a state where it is not.
Then, in the case where a new special figure start memory (special figure start memory A) is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, the advance notice is made in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory A. When the effect is not executed, a blank image is displayed as the special display 42c instead of the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A as shown in FIG. 112 (b). Here, the start memory display 42b is switched to the special display 42c by performing an effect such that the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 do not appear even when the bag is opened. At this time, the special display 42c is not limited to a blank image (see FIG. 113 (a)) and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the special display 42c is any one of the images shown in FIGS. 113 (b) to 113 (e). May be.

  Further, when a new special figure start memory (special figure start memory B) is generated before the special figure variation display game is finished, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), it corresponds to the special figure start memory A. In the start memory display area 42 to be displayed, the normal display mode no start memory display 42b is once displayed (in this example, the bag is temporarily closed). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the corresponding start memory display area 42, start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 (in this example, the start memory display 42a2 of the pre-reading effect mode) corresponding to the special figure start memory A are displayed and corresponding to the special figure start memory B In the start memory display area 42, the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 (in this example, the start memory display 42a1 in the normal display mode) corresponding to the special figure start memory B are displayed.

Note that, in this modification, regardless of whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory B, the advance memory is displayed in the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory A. If the notice effect is not executed, the special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A is displayed instead of the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A. If the advance notice effect is not executed in both the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the memory A and the start memory display area 42 corresponding to the special figure start memory B, the start memory corresponding to the special figure start memory A Instead of the displays 42a1 and 42a2, a special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A may be displayed.
Further, when the advance notice effect is not executed in all the start memory display areas 42, the special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A is displayed instead of the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A. It can also be configured to display.
Further, when the special figure start memory is digested while the special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A is displayed, the special display 42c is moved as it is (in the case of this modification, one is displayed on the left). The special display 42c can be changed to the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A during the movement.

If the special figure start memory B does not occur, the start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the special figure start memory A are not displayed, and the special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A remains displayed. In this modified example, when the special figure start memory B is not generated before the start of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory A, the special figure start is started from the special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A. After switching to the start memory display 42a1 and 42a2 corresponding to the memory A, the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory A is started.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), in the state where the special display 42c indicating the special figure start memory A is displayed, the special figure start memory immediately before the special figure start memory A is displayed. When the figure fluctuation display game is executed and the special figure fluctuation display game is finished as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the special figure start memory A is handled as shown in FIG. 114 (c). In the start memory display area 42, the start memory no display 42b2 in the normal display mode is once displayed (in this example, the bag is temporarily closed), and as shown in FIG. 114 (d), it corresponds to the special figure start memory A. Start memory displays 42a1 and 42a2 (in this example, the start memory display 42a2 of the pre-reading effect mode) are displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), a special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory A is displayed. It can also be configured to start That. Thereby, the pre-read information of the special figure start memory A can be suggested before the execution of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory A.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, a variable winning device (special variable winning devices 38 and 39) that can be converted into a closed state and an open state, and a game control means (game control) that controls the progress of the game. Device 100) and production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production related to the game based on information from the game control means (game control device 100), and a variable prize device corresponding to the result of the game. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a round game in which the (special variation winning device 38, 39) is converted into an open state is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game control means (game control device 100) Interval instruction means (game control device 100) for generating interval information (interval command) for instructing the effect control means (effect control device 300) to end, and a special game state Ending instruction means (game control device 100) for generating ending information (ending command) for instructing the effect control means (effect control device 300) to end, and a variable winning device (special variable winning devices 38, 39 at the end of the round game) ) Remaining ball processing period setting means (game control device 100) for setting a remaining ball processing period (large winning opening remaining ball processing time) for confirming that the game balls remaining in the game are discharged from the variable winning device; It has. Then, the interval instruction means (game control device 100) generates interval information (interval command) at the end of the round game regardless of how many round games of the predetermined number of round games have ended, and the ending The instruction means (game control device 100) is configured to generate ending information (ending command) at the end of the remaining ball processing period (large winning opening remaining ball processing time) when all of the predetermined number of round games have ended. Yes.

Therefore, interval information (interval command) is generated every time a round game is completed, and ending information (ending command) can be generated when a predetermined number of round games are completed. Interval information (ending command) can be generated without performing the process of determining whether or not Therefore, the processing is simplified and the processing load can be reduced.
It is also possible to configure the remaining ball processing period (large winning opening remaining ball processing time) only when the current round is the final round.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) provides an effect (ending effect) for notifying the end of the special game state based on the ending information (ending command) instructed from the game control means (game control device 100). It can also be configured to execute.

  The ending information (ending command) is not generated immediately after the end of the predetermined number of round games, but is generated at the end of the remaining ball processing period (large winning opening remaining ball processing time). Therefore, with this configuration, even when a predetermined number of round games are completed, the effect of notifying the end of the special game state is not immediately executed. Until the (big winning opening remaining ball processing time) is over, it is difficult for the player to understand the type of the special game state, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Also, in the special game state, a variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 (or second special winning device 38 (or second special winning device 38) (or second special winning device 38) (or second special winning device 38) The first special game state in which the variable winning device 39)) is converted into an open state and a closed state, and a second opening / closing pattern including a first opening / closing pattern (upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (or lower winning opening opening / closing pattern) 2, 3)), there is a second special game state in which the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 (or second special variable winning device 39)) is converted into an open state and a closed state. In the 2 open / close pattern (upper large prize opening / closing pattern 4 (or lower large prize opening / closing pattern 2, 3)), first the first open / close pattern (upper large prize opening / closing pattern 3 (or lower large prize opening / closing pattern) 1)) In certain opening pattern, variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38 (or the second special variation winning device 39)) It is also possible to configure to be converted into an open state and a closed state.

  With this configuration, in the first special gaming state, ending information (ending command) is generated after the first opening / closing pattern (upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 (or lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 1)) is completed. In the second special gaming state, the ending information (ending command) is given after the end of the predetermined opening / closing pattern following the first opening / closing pattern (upper winning opening / closing pattern 3 (or lower winning opening / closing pattern 1)). Generated. Therefore, after the first opening / closing pattern (upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 (or lower higher prize opening opening / closing pattern 1)) ends, ending information (ending command) is generated, or a predetermined opening / closing pattern starts. Until then, it is difficult for the player to know whether the first special game state or the second special game state, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The special gaming state includes a third special gaming state in which the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted into an open state and a closed state by a third opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 2). A variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted into an open state and a closed state by a fourth opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 3) including a common opening / closing pattern common to the third opening / closing pattern. There are four special gaming states, and in the third opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 2), the variable opening device (the second special variable winning device 39) is first a common opening / closing pattern and then a unique opening / closing pattern. ) Is converted into an open state and a closed state, and in the fourth opening / closing pattern (lower large prize opening opening / closing pattern 3), the opening / closing pattern is advantageous for the player than the specific opening / closing pattern at first. Patter In emissions, it is also possible to change the winning device (second special variation winning device 39) is configured to be converted into an open state and a closed state.

  By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to know whether the third special game state or the fourth special game state until the opening / closing pattern after the end of the common opening / closing pattern starts. Can be increased.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes the variable display device (display device 41) including a display unit capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and triggered by the establishment of the start condition. A gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the acquired random number value, and a start memory holding means (game control device 100) that stores the acquired random number value as a start memory up to a predetermined number, and a predetermined number Among the holding display units (starting storage display area 42) arranged in correspondence with the display unit, the holding display unit corresponding to the starting storage stored in the starting storage holding unit (game control device 100) The start memory display means (effect control device 300) for displaying the hold display image (start memory display 42a) in the display mode, and the specific effect image (advance notice effect mode for the hold display portion (start memory display area 42)) A specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a specific effect (advance notice effect) that displays the display without start memory 42b2), and the specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) is a hold display image. A specific effect image (no start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) is displayed on the hold display unit (start memory display area 42) where (start memory display 42a) is not displayed, and then at least the specific effect image The display of the specific effect image is continued until the start memory corresponding to the hold display section (start memory display area 42) displaying is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100). Has been.

Therefore, since the specific effect (advance notice effect) can be executed in the hold display unit (start memory display area 42) for which the corresponding start memory has not yet been stored, it is possible to perform an effect that increases the player's expectation from an early stage. Can improve the interest of the game.
In addition, by executing the advance notice effect, it is possible to alert the player who was about to end the game to continue the game.
Note that the hold display image may be a still image or a moving image.

  In addition, the execution contents of the variable display game are preliminarily determined based on the random number value stored as the start memory in the start memory holding means (game control device 100), and predetermination result information (prefetch symbol command, prefetch variation pattern command, etc.) The start memory display means (production control device 300) executes the variable display game with respect to the start memory stored in the start memory hold means (game control device 100). If it is determined whether or not the content is to be subject to a prior notification effect (prefetching effect) that can be suggested to the player before the execution of the variable display game, The hold display image (start-up) is displayed in the display mode (pre-reading effect mode) based on the prior determination result information on the hold display unit (start-up memory display area 42) corresponding to the start memory. The specific display executing means (effect control device 300) displays a hold display unit (start storage display area 42) displaying a specific effect image (no start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode). ) Is stored in the start memory hold display means (game control device 100), the specific effect image depends on whether or not the start memory is a target of a prior notification effect (pre-read effect). It is also possible to configure each to change to different modes.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the willingness to generate the start memory corresponding to the hold display unit (start memory display area 42) in which the specific effect (advance notice effect) is being executed, thereby suppressing stoppage. can do.

  Specifically, the specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) corresponds to the hold display unit (starting memory display area 42) displaying the specific effect image (the start-up notice effect-less display 42b2). When the start memory to be stored is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100), and the start memory is a target of a prior notification effect (prefetch effect), at least a part of the specific effect image Can be configured to be displayed together with the hold display image of the display mode (the start storage display 42a2 of the pre-reading effect mode) based on the pre-determination result information displayed by the start memory display means (effect control device 300).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the willingness to generate the start memory corresponding to the hold display section (start memory display area 42) in which the specific effect (pre-reading notice effect) is being executed, thereby suppressing stoppage. can do.

  On the other hand, the specific effect execution means (the effect control device 300) has a start memory corresponding to the hold display unit (start memory display area 42) displaying a specific effect image (no start memory display 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode). Is stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100), and when the start memory is not the subject of the prior notification effect (pre-read effect), the specific effect image may be deleted. Is possible.

  With this configuration, when the advance notification effect (pre-reading effect) is not executed, the specific effect (advance notice effect) ends, so that the specified effect (advance notice effect) is given as the prior notification effect as in this embodiment. In the case where the effect of notifying the appearance of (pre-reading effect) is used, it is possible to perform an effect (proactive announcement effect) that increases the player's expectation without reducing the reliability of the prior notification effect (pre-reading effect).

  In addition, a first game period (prefetch low probability zone) and a second game period (prefetch high probability zone) in which the probability of executing the prior notification effect (prefetch effect) is higher than the first game period (prefetch low probability zone), , And the specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) can be configured to execute the specific effect (advance notice effect) only in the second game period (prefetch high probability zone). .

  With this configuration, the specific effect (advance notice effect) is executed only in the second game period (prefetch high probability zone) where the execution probability of the prior notification effect (prefetch effect) is high, as in this embodiment. When the specific effect (advance notice effect) is an effect for notifying the appearance of the prior notification effect (prefetch effect), the specific effect (advance notice effect) is unlikely to be a gaze effect.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment (specifically, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 4), a variable display device including a display unit capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner ( A game machine that includes a display device 41) and executes a variable display game based on a random number value acquired when the start condition is satisfied, and stores the acquired random number value as a start memory up to a predetermined number Of the storage holding means (game control device 100) and a plurality of hold display units (starting storage display area 42) arranged on the display unit corresponding to a predetermined number, stored in the start memory holding means (game control device 100) Start memory display for displaying a hold display image (start memory display 42a) in any one of a plurality of display modes (normal display mode and prefetch effect mode) on the hold display unit corresponding to the start memory means( The start storage display means (production control apparatus 300) is a hold display image in a special display mode different from a plurality of display modes (normal display mode and pre-reading performance mode) at a predetermined ratio. (Special display 42c) can be displayed on the hold display section (starting storage display area 42).

  Therefore, since the hold display image (special display 42c) of the special display mode different from the normal display is displayed at a predetermined ratio, an unexpected hold display image can be displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In addition, when the start memory display means (production control device 300) is displaying the hold display image (special display 42c) in the special display mode, a new start memory is stored in the start memory hold means (game control device 100). As a result, the display mode of the hold display image may be changed from the special display mode to any one of a plurality of display modes (normal display mode and prefetch effect mode).

  By configuring in this way, the willingness to generate a new start-up memory can be increased, so that stoppage can be suppressed.

  In addition, a specific effect (advanced advance display mode 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) is displayed on the on-hold display unit (startup memory display area 42) where no on-hold display image (startup memory display 42a) is displayed. A specific effect executing means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect) is provided, and the start memory display means (effect control device 300) is a specific effect image (special display 42c) as a special display image (special display 42c). It is also possible to configure to display an image similar to the display without start memory 42b2) of the advance notice effect mode.

By configuring in this way, a specific effect image displayed on the hold display section (starting storage display area 42) in which the corresponding start memory is not yet stored as the hold display image (special display 42c) in the special display mode. Since an image similar to (no advance memory display 42b2 in the advance notice effect mode) can be displayed, the hold display image in the normal display mode (normal display mode and pre-read effect mode) despite the occurrence of the start memory It is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that the (starting memory display 42a) is not displayed.
Here, the image similar to the specific effect image (the display without start memory 42b2 of the advance notice effect mode) may be an image having a common point with the specific effect image. It may be an image including at least a part, or may be an image having the same shape and color as the specific effect image.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 38 1st special variable winning device (variable winning device)
39 Second special variable prize device (variable prize device)
41 Display device (variable display device)
42 Start memory display area (hold display)
42a Start memory display (hold display image)
42a2 Start memory display of pre-reading effect mode (pending display image of display mode based on prior determination result information)
42b2 Display without start memory of advance notice effect mode (specific effect image)
42c Special display (special display mode hold display image)
100 Game control device (game control means, interval instruction means, ending instruction means, remaining ball processing period setting means, start memory holding means, advance determination means)
300 effect control device (effect control means, start memory display means, specific effect execution means)

Claims (4)

A variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state and an open state, a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit that controls an effect related to the game based on information from the game control unit,
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a round game in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state corresponding to the result of the game is executed a predetermined number of times,
The game control means includes
Interval instruction means for generating interval information for instructing the effect control means to end the round game;
Ending instruction means for generating ending information for instructing the effect control means to end the special gaming state;
A remaining ball processing period setting means for setting a remaining ball processing period for confirming that a game ball remaining in the variable winning device at the end of the round game is discharged from the variable winning device;
With
The interval instruction means generates interval information at the end of the round game, regardless of how many round games of the predetermined number of round games have ended,
The ending instruction means generates the ending information at the end of the remaining ball processing period when all of the predetermined number of round games have ended. The production control means includes
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an effect of notifying the end of the special gaming state is executed based on the ending information instructed by the game control means. In the special game state,
A first special game state for converting the variable prize apparatus into an open state and a closed state in a first opening / closing pattern;
A second special game state in which the variable prize apparatus is converted into an open state and a closed state by a second open / close pattern including the first open / close pattern;
There is
3. The variable winning device according to claim 1, wherein, in the second opening / closing pattern, the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state at first by the first opening / closing pattern and thereafter by a predetermined opening / closing pattern. The gaming machine described. In the special game state,
A third special gaming state for converting the variable prize apparatus into an open state and a closed state in a third opening / closing pattern;
A fourth special game state in which the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state by a fourth open / close pattern including a common open / close pattern common to the third open / close pattern;
There is
In the third opening / closing pattern, the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state at first by the common opening / closing pattern and then by a specific opening / closing pattern,
In the fourth opening / closing pattern, the variable winning device is converted into an open state and a closed state at first by the common opening / closing pattern and thereafter by an opening / closing pattern more advantageous to the player than the specific opening / closing pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that: